Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

you learn how to create and set up an MEP project.Introduction In this tutorial. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. Finally. 1 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.

2 .

and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. electrical. such as mechanical equipment. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. fixtures. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. Germany. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. and plumbing fixtures. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. 3 . You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. and plumbing engineering workflows.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. Add more detailed modelling elements. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Add basic MEP elements. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. and piping. electrical panels. such as duct.

however. After completing each exercise. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. For example. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. So. Metric file names have an _m suffix. such as templates and families. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. as well as how to open and save them. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. annotations. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. For example. However. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and tags. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. and sheets to document the project. templates. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. NOTE Depending on your installation. views. Create schedules. Contact your CAD manager for more information. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. you can choose to save your work. In this exercise. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. On the Contents tab. to provide a richer and more finished design. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. your Training folder may be in a different location. When you open a training file. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. When you install the training files as instructed. Metric: files for users working with metric units. is located and accessed in the training files location. you learn where the training files are located. when you add ductwork. You do not design entire systems. Create detail views.

For File name.rvt and make changes. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. you are prompted to save the changes. and click Save. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. click ➤ Save As.rvt) is selected. the Open dialog displays. select the folder in which to save the new file. 4 Click the training file name.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. scroll down. For example. if you open settings. 8 If you have made changes. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. and click Open. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. double-click Imperial or Metric. and you can open any supported file type. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. a list of file types displays. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. Accessing Training Files | 5 . enter the new file name. and click the Training Files icon. verify that Project Files (*. You may close the file with or without saving changes. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. For Files of type. 3 In the right pane. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type.

6 .

the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. the hierarchy of elements. every drawing sheet. schedules. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. scope. As you work in drawing and schedule views. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. and phases when you need it. and plans. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. You learn the terminology. the floor or roof remains connected. drawing sheets. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. and schedules required for a building project. the parameter is one of association or connection. the door retains this relationship to the partition. drawings. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. the operation of the software is parametric. If you move the partition. hence. If the length of the elevation is changed. quantities. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. 2D and 3D view.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. sections. ■ ■ 7 . Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. In the Revit MEP model. In this case.

sprinklers. sinks. boilers. and electrical panels. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. For example. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. For example. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. levels. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. tags. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. They help to describe or document the design.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. For example. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. and electrical panels. For example. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. sprinklers. ducts. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. Datum elements help to define project context. When you change something. For example. boilers. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. For example. walls and ceilings are hosts. sinks. and keynotes are annotation elements. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. ducts. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. Examples include detail lines. and 2D detail components. dimensions. They display in relevant views of the design. tags. and reference planes are datum elements. grids. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . dimensions. filled regions.

In other cases. you can explicitly control them. you do nothing to establish these relationships. This information includes components used to design the model. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. North . and drawings of the design. If you can draw. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. and types. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. you must be in a section or elevation view. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. for example. from geometry to construction data. Project: In Revit MEP. and ceilings. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. and so forth). top of wall. or bottom of foundation. For example. However. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. The project file contains all information for the building design. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. By using a single project file. floors. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. section views. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. elevation views. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. programming is not required. such as roofs. Often. families. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. schedules. views of the project. In Revit MEP. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. To place levels. Most often. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. first floor. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. some terms are unique to Revit MEP.

but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. showing. For example. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. and wires. each in-place family contains only a single type.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. hiding. For example. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. and similar graphical representation. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. You can also display several project views at one time. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. For example. identical use. With a few clicks. System families include ducts. pipes. or layer the views to see only the one on top. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). However. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. Then experiment with them. Type: Each family can have several types. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. Unlike system and standard component families. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. such as a A0 title block. A type can be a specific size of a family. A type can also be a style. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. System families can be transferred between projects. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project.

Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 .Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. To return the panel to the ribbon.

architect-specific tools.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed.. When working on the Modify tab. and settings. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. data and systems. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. tools used for running analysis on the current design. and CAD files. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. tools used for editing existing elements. project and system parameters. and for switching views. then select what you want to modify.. select the tool first. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. tools used for managing and modifying the current view.

To keep a panel expanded.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. For example. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. closes the application menu (double-click). By default. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. when adding duct. provides access to common tools. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. provides requested information. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. displays frequently used tools. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command.

NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. such as Export and Publish. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. (Export) On the application menu. select a file to open. click.. select a template and create a new drawing... (Open) save the current drawing. (Save As) export the current drawing. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics ..

annotation. (Licensing) close the file. Camera. (Print) access product and license information. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. family. annotation. click. to. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. and Walkthrough. saves a current project.. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . family.. publish the current project. (Publish) print the current drawing. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. provides views including Default 3D.. but is not enabled by default. or template file.On the application menu. or template file. To enable or disable a tool item. enters selection mode and ends the current operation.. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session.

Group. Starting with the most recent command. Clipboard. Clear the Status Bar check mark.To undo or redo a series of operations. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. check the Status Bar. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. This displays the command history in a list. In addition. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). However. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. When you are highlighting an element or component. To show the Status Bar again. repeat the command. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. displaying the same information. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. or the Family Editor. Modify. When you are using a command. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. To hide the Status Bar. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. workshared components. when you switch to another editing mode. a tool tip appears next to the cursor.

Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element.To cancel or exit the current command. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. select one or more elements of the same category. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. When you place an element in a drawing. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. for example. Place a Wall. click (Modify). To change existing elements to a different type. On the Quick Access toolbar.

Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. In the following steps. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Zoom the view In the tutorials. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. 1 Click ➤ Open. There are several ways to access zoom options. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. After you are familiar with these tasks. click Training Files. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view.rvt. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. For example. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m.

When you release the mouse button. To modify or add snap increments. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. the view zooms in on the selected area. 6 Click in the drawing area. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 5 Click Zoom To Fit.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. In the drawing area. Modifying the View | 19 . 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. this is referred to as a crossing selection. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. NOTE As you zoom in and out. on the Navigation bar. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). click . 9 To display SteeringWheels. If you do not have a wheel mouse. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region.

20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. and click tin the Options dialog. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. For more information about SteeringWheels. and then using the Zoom tool again. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. moving the wheel to the desired location. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. As you move the mouse. To define settings for SteeringWheels. 14 To exit the wheel. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. click the SteeringWheels tab. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. Click and drag to orbit the design. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. ➤ Options. press ESC.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area.

it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. called drag controls. 3 Click and drag the bottom control. After you are familiar with these tasks. and select the duct.Design ➤ Floor Plans. as shown. Small blue dots. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. bottoms.HVAC Plan .Design. Similar controls. display along the ends. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. and open Level 2 . zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. referred to as shape handles. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. 2 Enter ZR. These are the drag controls. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area.

or press CTRL+Z. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. In this example. 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. select the first item in the list. Move. click the Undo command. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. 6 On the Undo menu. on the Standard toolbar. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions.

Performing Common Tasks | 23 . and click again to specify the ending position. for example. After selecting the element to move. and drag it to the left as shown. you want to move the duct. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct.Some commands. click to specify the starting position. as shown. 11 With the duct already selected. 10 Move the cursor to the right. The duct is moved to the new position. In this case. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. such as Move and Copy. require 2 clicks to complete the command.

click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. 14 Enter VG. such as the Modify Ducts command. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Select Mechanical . Click OK. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical .Supply.Return. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed.End a command Some commands. Press ESC twice. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For example. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 13 To end a command. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

create and manage views. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. such as ducts and pipes. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. and open North. under Create new. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. 6 Click OK. and loadable families. such as coordination review and interference checking. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. 2 In the New Project dialog. system families. New projects inherit all the families. You can choose from several templates. and geometry from the starting template. you learn how to start a project from a template. select Project. Finally. the default building levels and standard views. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. click Training files. 5 In the New Project dialog. link files. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 7 In the Project Browser. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. such as the default project units and settings. and open Metric ➤ Templates. and click Open.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. and modify system settings. You can either select a template from the template library. settings. In that case.rte template. under Template file. click Browse. 27 . Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. use copy/monitor. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings.

18 In the Project Parameters dialog. click (Browse). Click OK twice. click Browse. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. for City. For Location. When you select the material. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. NH. select Level 1. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. review the construction materials listed. For example. under Energy Analysis. ■ For Building Construction. you can select it now. select Project template. In the Choose Template dialog. click Edit.rte template and click Open. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. If you want to use a template other than the default. and select the Systems-Default_Metric. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. ■ ■ For Ground Plane.8 In the drawing area. (Browse). Click OK. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. ■ ■ Under Create new. select School or University. 10 Using the same method. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. for Energy Data. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . navigate to Metric Templates. select Manchester. create another new project using the Construction template. Click Cancel. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type.

plumbing. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project.00 mm. After standard settings have been established for an organization. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . For Ground Wire Tick Mark.000 mm.00 mm. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. click Wiring.00 mm. and 310. wiring. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. 26 In the right pane. and 140. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected.00 mm. 24 In the right pane. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. click Round. and fire protection systems. select Views.rfa and click Open.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. 140. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. 23 In the left pane. for 20. and demand factors for electrical systems. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. piping. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. power distribution systems. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. Holding CTRL.00 mm. 33 Click OK. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. for 90. 290. click Sizes. select Identity Data. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark.00 mm. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. For Categories. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. 260. under Duct Settings. 110.00 mm. Click OK twice.00 mm. under Pipe Settings. 22 In the right pane. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 25 In the left pane.00 mm. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. under Duct Settings. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. for 90. 110. click Rectangular. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 27 Click OK.

and groups that are contained in a project. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. Notice that the file is saved as a template. From the Positioning list. You need to create the MEP model for the project. For Then by. Select Ascending Click OK twice. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. 2 In the New Project dialog. For Then by. click Training. under Create new. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. under Template file. 38 Close the file. For Sort by. click Browse. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. select Associated Level. families. select Auto . 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. To enable this coordination. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. sheets.rvt. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .Origin to Origin. select Sub-Discipline. Click Open. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. 4 In the New Project dialog. 5 Click OK. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. In addition. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. Linking Projects In this exercise. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. select View Name. select Family and Type. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. select Project. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed.

10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 12 Click OK. 8 If necessary. select the linked architectural model. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. select Room Bounding.The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. Linking Projects | 31 . reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North . under Constraints.Mech.

verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog. 17 On the Options Bar. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 19 On the left side of the view. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. click Plan View types. click the level line for 03.Floor.

level 3. After copying. indicating that a relationship is established. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. for the link file. click Custom. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. highlight the linked model. and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element. 34 On the Basics tab. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. appears above the copied elements. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. and click to select the linked model. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 29 In the drawing area. a warning message displays. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. warnings notify you of any violations. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. and the level 4. indicating that an element has changed. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. click By Host View. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. Linking Projects | 33 . Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. 27 In the drawing area. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. select Custom.

Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. Click OK. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Under Visibility. Under Visibility. 36 Click OK. Site. Select Show categories from all disciplines. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . Planting. under View Properties. Click OK. 7 Click OK twice. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. select Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. for Name. deselect Parking. deselect Levels. 3 In the View templates dialog.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Roads.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. and Topography. 5 On the Basics tab. for the link file. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. click Custom. click Edit. click Custom. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog. enter Mechanical View and click OK.

9 In the Options dialog. select Invert background color. Notice that the drawing area is black. click the Graphics tab. 7 Click OK. under Template file. 5 In the New Project dialog. they are not saved to project files or template files. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. 3 Under Colors. under View Templates. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 8 Click ➤ Options. These settings control the graphics.rte. and click OK. and your username when using worksharing. Modifying System Settings In this exercise. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. selection default options. click Training Files.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. click the Graphics tab. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. select Mechanical and click OK. journal cleanup options. Modifying System Settings | 35 . Modifying General System Options In this exercise. 2 In the Options dialog. notification preferences. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. click Browse. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment.

16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 18 Select the wall. 21 Close the file without saving it. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Specifying File Locations In this exercise. 2 In the Options dialog. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. 11 In the Color dialog. For Tooltip assistance. select One hour. the elements causing the error display using this color. click the value for Selection color. However. 14 Click OK. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red.10 Under Colors. 13 Under Notifications. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. and family libraries. you specify default file locations. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 17 Press ESC to end the command. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 12 Click the General tab. family template files. select None. 19 Press ESC to end the command. including your default project template. click the File Locations tab. When an error occurs. and click OK. select yellow.

This path is set automatically during the installation process. Save. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. 10 In the Places dialog. However.3 Under Default template file. click Places. and you can create new libraries. saving. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. centralized. 5 Under Default path for user files. under Default path for family template files. and Import dialogs. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. click Browse. Specifying File Locations | 37 . The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Load. or loading a Revit MEP file. You can modify the existing library names and path. click Browse. 8 Click Cancel. you can start a new project with that template. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. click Browse. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. When you are opening. 4 Click Cancel. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. select the folder to save your files to by default. In the following illustration. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 7 In the Options dialog. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. TIP To view a template. Click and click Browse to select a template. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. note the list of library names. and click Open. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. such as in a large. ➤ New ➤ Project.

and Import dialogs. or families. click My Library. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the My Library icon. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and click OK twice. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open.11 In the Places dialog. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 15 Under Library Name. and click (Browse). and click Open. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. ➤ Open. and change the name to My Library. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. and select it as the library path. click (Add Value). Load. templates. Save.

Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 11 In the Options dialog. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 5 In the text editor. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. click OK. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 20 Click ➤ Options. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. click the Spelling tab. 22 Select My Library. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. and decal image files. enter sheetmtl-Cu. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 2 In the Options dialog. such as bump maps. 14 Click in the drawing area. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 21 On the File Locations tab. click Places. 3 Under Settings. If you work in a large office. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. select Ignore words in uppercase. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. This path is determined during installation. 19 Click Cancel. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. view the current path. 12 Create a new project using the default template. custom color files. 9 In the text editor. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. click Edit. If you want to relocate this path. 27 Click OK. specify the new location here. click Edit.

work with snapping turned off. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. delete sheetmtl-CU. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. and enter 500 . 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click Browse.17 In the Spelling dialog. 6 In the Snaps dialog. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. You can turn snap settings on and off. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. you modify snap increments.rte. 20 Under Settings. under Template file. 23 In the text editor. click Training Files. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. click Restore Defaults. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 22 In the text editor. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. you modify snap settings. click OK. 21 Under Personal dictionary. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. In this exercise. 25 Close the file without saving it. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. click Edit. under Dimension Snaps. click Close. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click OK.. 2 In the New Project dialog. click the Spelling tab. As you zoom in and out within a view. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click File menu ➤ Save. 4 In the New Project dialog. 19 In the Options dialog. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 24 In the Options dialog. 18 Click ➤ Options.

A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. deselect Chain. and move the cursor to the right. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. For example. zoom out until it does so. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. This is the increment that you added previously. snapping reverts to the system default settings. click OK. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. 8 In the Snaps dialog. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. If you do not have a wheel button. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. TIP To zoom while sketching. such as ZO to zoom out.7 Under Object Snaps. While sketching. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. use the wheel button on your mouse. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. 10 On the Options Bar. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. If it does not. enter SM. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 .

42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and move the cursor to the right. and the wall edges. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. Do not set the wall end point. 19 Enter SM. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. it will snap to the endpoints. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Notice that snapping is once again active. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint.. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. If you move the cursor along the wall. the midpoint. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 25 Click OK. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. and delete the value 500 . click in the Length dimension snap increments box. with or without saving it. 26 Close the file. 22 Move the cursor downward. and specify the wall endpoint. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 24 Under Dimension Snaps.

43 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.

44 .

you first configure the linked architectural model. methodology. At the end of the tutorial. After finishing each exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. By following the recommended workflow. duct system and a hydronic piping system. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. you first plan the system. 45 . you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. As you create the mechanical system. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. This system consists of a cooling tower. In this exercise. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. you will understand the process. However.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you design a mechanical system for an office building.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. go to http://www. In this lesson. you can choose to save your work. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. water source heat pump (WSHP). This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. If the tutorial training files are not present. After applying a color scheme to the zones. and then you create a plenum level.autodesk.

You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . NOTE When working with a linked file. you add a level for plenums. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. and after the linked model highlights. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. ceilings. Next. 6 In the Project Browser. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. click Training Files. and double-click West . The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building.Space Plan is highlighted. 1 In the Project Browser. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . These components are defined in the architectural training file. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. under Constraints. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. and click OK. click to select it. select Room Bounding. not in the MEP training file. In this section. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. roof.MEP.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

The new level is placed.7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and click OK. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. and enter Level 2 Plenum. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. Click Plan View Types. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). For Offset. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. and in the Plan View Types dialog. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click Properties. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). 16 Press Esc. right-click Level 2 Plenum. Preparing Spaces | 47 . 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). 9 On the Draw panel. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. enter 2600mm.

click Edit. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. ■ Click OK twice. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. for Level. NOTE After finishing each exercise. for Default View Template. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. Under Extents. In the next exercise. you can choose to save your work. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. For Sub-Discipline. right-click Level 2 Plenum.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. and click Apply Default View Template. For Cut plane. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. select Level Above (Level 3).Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. for View Scale. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. and then place spaces in various types of areas. select Design. However. for Top. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Under Identity Data. enter 0. and for Offset. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. In this exercise. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. select MEP . They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . Under View Depth. In this exercise.Plenum. 20 In the Project Browser. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you place spaces in areas of the building model. select Plenum Plan. for View Range. enter an Offset of 300mm. For View Classification.

2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select New. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. select Level 2 Plenum. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. Placing Spaces | 49 . For Upper Limit. For (Tag Location). and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. and ceilings). For Offset. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. click Training Files. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.Space Plan is highlighted. enter 0. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. walls. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Horizontal.rvt. For Space. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model.

■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. Click OK. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. ensuring coordination between the files. 9 Select the space. 14 In the drawing area. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. enter Library. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Number. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26).7 Click to place the space. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. For Name. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter 219. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP .

15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. For Upper Limit. For Offset. and then click Modify. enter 0. 21 Using the method learned previously. Placing Spaces | 51 . demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. select Level 3. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it.

select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. and then split the space using a space separation line. you place a space in a large corridor area. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click OK. under Energy Analysis. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes.

indicating that it’s the active view. 5 On the Options Bar. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down.rvt. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. and for Offset. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then press Esc. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. click Training Files. select Level 3. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. for Upper Limit.Space Plan is highlighted. enter 0. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.

notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 9 In the schedule. and select Corridor. which was numbered 219Q. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. click in the name column. In the schedule. and scroll to the newly placed space.7 In the Project Browser. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 10 Click in the number column. and change the space number to 216A. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

as shown. 11 Close the schedule view. 15 Press Esc twice. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221.

18 Close the file with or without saving it. Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor.16 Using the method learned previously. you place a space in a chase. place a space in the lower area of the split space. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The new space is numbered correctly (216B).

Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. If necessary. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing.rvt. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.Space Plan is highlighted. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 .

enter 0. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. 10 In the plan view. select Roof Level. select the space. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. select Interior and Reference. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Level 3. 6 Enter VG. right-click. click in the chase area to place the space. For Offset. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click Element Properties. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. 12 Click in the section view. for Upper Limit. expand Spaces. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.4 Press Esc. for Upper Limit. and then click OK. In the plan view. On the Options Bar. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints.

for Name. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. ceilings. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. floors. Bounding elements (such as walls. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. enter 225PC. and maximize the view. 17 Type ZF.■ For Limit Offset. and click OK. For Number. 15 Press Esc. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . enter Chase. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations.Space Plan. enter 1200. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . under Loaded Tags. Under Identity Data. All spaces in the view are tagged. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. the space displays the volume up to the roof only.

Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create.rvt. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. click Training Files. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. In the next exercises. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. which removes the space from the Default zone. After a space is placed in an area. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click View ➤ Zones. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. it is automatically added to the Default zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Spaces. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. click Reference. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. indicating that it’s the active view. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. 1 In the Project Browser. you view and verify zones in the System Browser.Zoning is highlighted. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. In this exercise.20 Close the file with or without saving it. To display space reference lines. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.

you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. you assign spaces to a zone. indicating that the space is occupiable. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. To display space reference lines. under Spaces. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The Zone tool is active.Zoning is highlighted. The graphic in the System Browser updates. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 7 Close the file with or without saving it. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. under Energy Analysis. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. and click OK. and verify the zones in the System Browser. Next. you assign spaces to zones in the building. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . As you do this. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. double-click 121 Cafeteria. ) or 5 In the System Browser. the Edit Zone tab displays. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. select Occupiable. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. and a new zone is created. click Reference.

NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you can add or remove a space from the zone. type VG. Using the Edit Zone tab. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. Click OK. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). select Computer Lab 222. and modify the zone properties. Expand HVAC Zones. 5 With the drawing area active. In the System Browser. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. and Electrical 220 spaces. and click Finish Editing Zone. To view the zone in the drawing area. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. select HVAC Zones. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. 4 In the drawing area. Instruction. you need to activate the zone visibility. Instruction 221. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.

rvt. You activated zone visibility in the views. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . for Name. To display space reference lines. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. click Training Files. 11 Close the System Browser. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. indicating that it’s the active view. under Spaces. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 10 On the Edit Zone tab.TIP After you finish editing the zone. and verify the zone in the System Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building.West . and click OK.West .Zoning is highlighted. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Zoning view to activate it. click Reference. In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Identity Data. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. click Finish Editing Zone. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 9 In the System Browser. expand 2 .Area B. 5 Click in the Level 1 .Zoning. enter 2 .

10 Click Finish Editing Zone. click in the Level 2 . 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. Select Attached End.6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 .Zoning view. Verify that the distance is 12mm. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.Zoning view. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 9 With the Add Space tool active. 15 Press Esc. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 8 In the Level 1 . zoom out.Zoning floor plan. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone.

East. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. double-click the zone tag. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). and select 109 Lounge. on the ViewCube. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Front. verify that Wireframe is selected. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and zone information. In this exercise.Zoning to make it the active view.rvt. Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . click the corner where the Top. for Name Value. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m.Zoning view. double-click Level 1 . View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. space. click Training Files. and click OK. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. you verify the building. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. enter Lounge .

The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. you isolate the space. ■ ■ On the Details tab.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select 1_South_Area C. Using the Highlight tool. Next. With 109 Lounge selected. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. click (Isolate). You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. ■ Click (Highlight).

For Electrical Loads. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone.11 °C : 32. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. verify that <Building> is selected. the zone information displays for the selected zone. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. For Construction Type. click (Shading). select Lounge/Recreation. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. outdoor air per area. the space information displays for the selected space. Next. and then click OK. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. ■ ■ ■ Next. click . and in the People dialog. verify that 21. select 109 Lounge. For Heating Information. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. scroll down in the left pane. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. verify that 23. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. Below the list of spaces and zones. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. and air changes per hour. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. and dehumidification set point. For Cooling Information. and click OK. This indicates the outdoor air per person. cooling air temperature.33 °C : 12. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). Next. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. For People. verify that <Building> is selected. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. This indicates the heating set point. and humidification set point. click . This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters.22 °C : N/A is specified. heating air temperature. and then click OK. This indicates the cooling set point. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . Below the list of spaces and zones. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. click . NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point.22 °C : N/A is specified. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space.

and other room-bounding components. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. click Cancel. floors. 15 In the Project Browser. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. roofs. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. select Level 3. open MEP . enter 0. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. For Offset. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. 12 Using the methods learned previously.

Under Energy Analysis. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Click OK.Modify space properties 19 Select the space. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. Because this is an unoccupied space. For Name. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. space. In this exercise. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. select Plenum. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . Under Energy Analysis. you verified building. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and select space Plenum 212P. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). enter 212P. for Number. select Plenum. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and verify that the space has replaced the void. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. and zone information. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone.

verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). under Energy Analysis. If. this option adjusts the times automatically. select School or University. verify that <Building> is specified. For Export Complexity. is selected. enter 03101. under Volume Computations. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. On the Weather tab. select space Library 219. and click OK. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog.rvt. verify that Level 1 is selected. you need to select this option. right-click. for Building Service. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . verify that New Construction is selected. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. verify that 300 is specified. For Location. click in the Value field. for City. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 8 In the drawing area. NH. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. For Project Phase. On the Place tab. For Building Construction. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. and click Element Properties. For Postal Code. double-click Level 2 . In order to select a space. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Sliver Space Tolerance. for Energy Data. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that Manchester. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. For Ground Plane. and click OK. click Edit. Click OK twice. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.Space Plan. click Training Files. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display.

m. verify that Occupiable is selected. for Values. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. verify that <Building> is specified. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. Click OK. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. For Location. click Edit.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. For People. is specified. For Building Construction. enter 60 W. For Building Service. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. Select the space associated with the warning. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. verify that School or University is selected. for Values. for Values. select Specified. For Space Type. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.Audio Visual. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. select Library . ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. Next. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. select Heated and cooled. For Latent. verify that Manchester. for Values. select Actual. and enter 15 sq. enter 45 W. Under Heat Gain (per Person). Under Power. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . a cooling load. and click to learn the cause for the warning. select Specified. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Select Area per person. select Actual. click Edit. click in the Value column. and click OK. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). For Condition Type. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. Click OK twice. NH. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. 12 Click the Details tab. You have verified the building information. and then click . both. For Sensible. or neither.

20 In the Instance Properties dialog. 17 In the loads report. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. 16 After you review the loads report. select 219 Library. space. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. click Information). A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. weather.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. There should be no warnings displayed. and can be modified here.Space Plan. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. and zone information for the building model. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. space. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. In this exercise. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. or make any changes to the model. 19 In the drawing area. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. and under Heating Information. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. 15 Review the loads report for project. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. or zone information. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. and a loads report displays. under Energy Analysis. and click OK. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. 21 Click OK. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.11°C. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. You should correct the space error in the building model. select 219 Library. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . click Calculate.

For Color Scheme. 5 Zoom in to the legend. indicating that it’s the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. select HVAC Zones. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. click Training Files.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . Click OK. 3 In the drawing area. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m. click to the right of the building to place the legend. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. in relatively small increments. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .

Expanded Ranges. The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. select the color scheme legend. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. and click OK. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. under Schemes. The new scheme displays in the view. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Cooling Load . 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.

12 Close the file with or without saving it. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. In the next exercise. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. 11 Using the method learned previously. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 .rvt. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. In this exercise. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.

■ ■ Using the method learned previously.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. enter Space Airflow Schedule. For Discipline. For Phase. Select Formula. select Spaces. In the Schedule Properties dialog. Click OK. In the Fields dialog. ■ Click Calculated Value. Under Available fields. for Select available fields from. For Type. select New Construction.Space Fill is the active view. select Calculated Supply Airflow. and then click . verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. for Formula. select HVAC. select Spaces. Click OK. enter . 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. select Air Flow. Select Schedule building components. and click OK. click (Browse). more category options are available. enter Airflow Delta. For Name. In the Calculated Value dialog. For Formula. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser.

Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . For Value. Header. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. click the color swatch. select Level. select red. a view opens that contains the selected space. and Blank line. For Background Color. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. For Fields. Click OK twice. ■ The schedule displays. select Level. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. For Then by. and click OK. and then click Conditional Format. Select Ascending. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. right-click to access schedule properties. Under Conditions to Use. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. select Number. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. In the Color dialog. and then select Hidden field. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. select Not Between. select Airflow Delta. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. verify that Show is highlighted. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test.

This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. In the next lesson.Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. In later exercises. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. In this exercise.

Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). In this lesson. As you place the air terminals. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. Then. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you will create supply air systems. 79 . you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. and work with the airflow schedule. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. After completing the air systems lesson. After system creation. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. you modify air terminal parameters. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems.

zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.rvt. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . indicating that it’s the active view. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 3 In the ceiling view.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. the space crossing lines display. In the left pane of the Open dialog.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. and scroll to space 223. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser.

Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. 9 On the Placement panel. as shown. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . and press Enter. and press Enter. 13 On the Options Bar. enter 215 L/s. which in this case is the ceiling grid. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. verify that Constrain is cleared. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. select the diffuser. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. and then select both Copy and Multiple. If the host element is modified or moved. and then press Esc to end the command. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. for Flow. and select M_Supply Diffuser . Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. the hosted elements are updated as well. Also.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. 17 Move the cursor down. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. click Place on Face. The schedule updates with the new flow data. type 3600. 15 On the Options Bar.

and click Open. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 25 In the drawing area. click Yes. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 21 On the Options Bar. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . as shown. As you place the return diffusers. select one of the diffusers. 24 In the Open dialog. 28 On the Placement tab. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser .rfa. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. 22 In the drawing area. 29 Place 2 diffusers. and then press Esc. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag. click Place on Face. clear Leader. Next. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.

35 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click to select the lines. select one of the return diffusers. 31 In the alert dialog.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. select Strong Reference. for Reference. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. click Yes. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. Level. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. under Other. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . as shown. and click OK. 32 In the Project Browser. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family.

zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. align the other return diffuser. 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 40 In the drawing area. 43 Using the same method. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown. and then press Esc twice.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. select the vertical grid line as shown. and then select the top edge of the diffuser. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. as shown. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values.

you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule. As you place the air terminals. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. and click Element Properties. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left. select both return diffusers. enter 310 L/s. 47 Using the same method. under Mechanical. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling.44 While pressing Ctrl. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . and press Enter. right-click. clear LeftArrow. for Flow. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog.

10 In the drawing area. verify that Tag on Placement is selected. and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile.200 Neck. click to place the air terminal in the space as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans. When you highlight a space using the cursor. expand HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view.rvt. the space crossing lines display. and double-click Level 1 . 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 9 On the Options Bar. click Training Files.Design to make it the active view. 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 2 On the View Control Bar. and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. at the lower left corner of the building.HVAC Plan . click 1 : 100. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. for Scale. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. select M_Supply Diffuser . 8 In the Type Selector. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser.

the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical . you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. enter 170 L/s. 15 Press Esc. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. type 6000. Click OK. and then press Enter. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. under Constraints. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . enter 2400. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. for Offset. move the cursor down. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. 11 Select the diffuser. for Flow. Also.Airflow. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. As a result.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. By copying the diffuser.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers.16 Using the same method. and then press Esc. 18 On the Options Bar. clear Leader. select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right. Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.

21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and Flow. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. type. 29 Using the same method. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. for Flow. 25 Click OK 3 times. it is a negative value.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. for Sort by. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. select Air Terminals. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. under Available Fields. Mark. click Edit. Type. select Mark. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. and click View Properties. and then right-click in the schedule. tile the windows. under space 115. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. double-click System Type. mark. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. under Other. and press Enter. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. for Embedded Schedule. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 27 In the schedule. For Category. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. 26 Using the method learned previously. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . select 21. enter 210 L/s. Next. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

and maximize Level 1 . As you highlight the zone.HVAC Plan .Design. 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 31 In the drawing area. as shown. Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule. pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space.The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number. select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone.

39 Press Esc twice to end the command.7-18 kW . 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway.32 Open the Instance Properties dialog. and under Energy Analysis. 35 In the Type Selector. select M_WSHP .High Efficiency .Horizontal .3 times the heating load). Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 .97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531. 33 Click OK. zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW. 36 In the drawing area.43 W (approximately 1.

you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. However. As you add diffusers to systems. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area.rvt. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. the space crossing lines display. You then create the logical connection between the system components. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. After creating the logical connection. including energy analysis. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . for Constraints ➤ Offset. In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. When you highlight a space. indicating that it’s the active view. right-click the title. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 6 Keep the System Browser open. click Training Files. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. and click View ➤ Systems. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder.HVAC Plan . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. 44 Zoom in to space 115. enter . you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Design is highlighted. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. and click OK.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 11 In the drawing area. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). the number of elements is updated. 17 Using the method learned previously. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. and Flow value. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 18 Click OK. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and the system connects them. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. On the Options Bar. the air terminals are the children. review the Number of Elements. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. Connect Into. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 12 In the System Browser. System Name.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. 15 Click Cancel.

24 In the Instance Properties dialog.Rename the system Next. click Training Files. 22 Click OK.rvt. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 25 Click OK. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. In this exercise. In this exercise. under Identity Data. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. for System Name. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. 26 Click Finish Editing System. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. under Mechanical. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. for Mark. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. which updates the name in the System Browser. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

the Network type provides several solutions. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. enter 3000. and display solution 1.Round. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. For Duct Type. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.Design is highlighted. which provides various layout tools. enter 3000. 4 In the drawing area. select the upper left diffuser. For Flex Duct Type. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Flex Duct Round : Flex . For Offset. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. indicating that it’s the active view. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. for Solution Type. A Generate Layout tab displays. 5 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. Also. the space crossing lines display. In this case. For Offset. When you highlight a space using the cursor. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 .HVAC Plan. click Settings. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). Select Branch. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . select Network. For Duct Type.

If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. enter 900. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. 11 Click Finish Layout. click Modify. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. Click OK. or offset elevations are incorrect. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you’ll get an error in a later step. For example. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. select a different layout solution. or manually modify the duct. Either relocate the system components. as is the elbow itself. as shown. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork.

Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. and equipment. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. and click OK. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. The first time you press Tab. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. and click to select it. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. fittings. highlight a segment of the main duct.Flow. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. for Color Scheme. a disconnection exists. thus it is not part of the system. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. Using a flow-based color scheme. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. If the entire network does not highlight. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. select Duct Color Fill . 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. Usually. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. You can delete ductwork and the system remains.

and then click OK. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). and press Enter. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. for Values Displayed. The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. but not all values are used in this view. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Flow.Airflow. select By View. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. under Graphics.Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. select one of the diffusers in the system. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. under Mechanical . select the WSHP. 20 In the drawing area.

29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. for Schemes. select the color scheme legend. select Duct Color Fill . Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. click Cancel. and enter . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 .Velocity. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. Select Only. Select the upper segment of main duct.65 Pa/m. select Calculated Size Only. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. and then press Esc to clear the selection. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. select Friction. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Select Restrict Height. Click OK. highlight a segment of the duct. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. Under Constraints. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. and select 400. and drag it to the right. for Branch Sizing. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). and then click to select it. 26 Click OK. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area.

The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 33 Move the cursor over the system components. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. pressure. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. and pressure loss. Using this tool. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. Use the information that displays (flow.The ductwork and fittings are updated. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. static pressure.

36 Close the file with or without saving it. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct.NOTE As you inspect a system. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure.rvt. 35 Click Finish. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. also known as the critical path.

7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. and click to specify the end of the main duct. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view. and select the WSHP. and click Draw Duct. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner.HVAC Plan . and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location.Design is highlighted.

double-click MEP . 15 On the ViewCube. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. and click Draw Duct. right-click the connector grip. NOTE When drawing duct.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . for Offset. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height.3D MEP. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. Front. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 3000. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. 14 In the Project Browser. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. select the top right diffuser. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. 11 On the Options Bar. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . click the corner where the Top. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector.

20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 19 In the drawing area. it is considered a closed loop. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. in space 115.Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. The ductwork is automatically created. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

22 Using the same method. and select the top left diffuser. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . 25 Press Esc. You can ignore the warning. Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct.

Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct.Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 30 Press Esc twice. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. and then click Modify.

Airflow. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. and click OK.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . under Constraints. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. such as a plenum. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. for Flow. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click OK. and click to select it. 40 Using the same method. select a segment of the main duct. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. under Mechanical . 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. clear Restrict Height.

108 .

This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. In this lesson. Automatically and manually lay out piping. Then.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. you place mechanical equipment. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. 109 . you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. and a cooling tower located on the roof. including 2 base mounted pumps. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. Create return and supply piping systems. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. on level 3 of the building model.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Left Return .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m. as shown.7-18kW .HVAC Plan .Horizontal High Efficiency . 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. in corridor 328.Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. and select M_WSHP . click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.

Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 .NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click to place the dimension. and enter 600. verify that Wall faces is selected. 7 On the Options Bar. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. click the top edge of the WSHP. 10 Select the WSHP. as shown. 8 Click the corridor wall face. click the dimension.

as shown.) 14 Click Modify. and in the Type Selector.11 Press Enter and then press Esc. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. verify that the WSHP is still selected. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. select the 2 WSHPs.

and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . 21 Click Modify. enter 0.75 L/s. enter 2750. Under Mechanical. for Offset. Click OK. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. and click to place it in the mechanical room. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Water Flow.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.

You can create pipes to connect system components. but without a corresponding system. Unlike logical connections (systems). This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. Create the logical connection between the system components.22 Close the file with or without saving it. analyses cannot be performed. including flow and pressure. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. you create the return and supply piping systems.

Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. and click View ➤ Piping. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. where it is easier to review the information. select the 2 WSHPs.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Mech 330). right-click the Systems column heading. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. This display indicates that the system is selected.rvt. Therefore. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. In the System Browser. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. In the left pane of the Open dialog. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. As you assign equipment to systems.HVAC Plan . Creating a Piping System | 115 . while pressing Ctrl. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. 5 In the System Browser. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. Assigning a system component to an existing system. indicating that it’s the active view.

TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. for System Name. Notice that on the Options Bar. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. You have created the hydronic return system. 10 On the Options Bar. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. and the Edit System tool is not active. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. for System Name. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. 12 In the drawing area. select the boiler. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 13 Click Finish Editing System. 17 On the Options Bar.

the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. double-click Roof . 23 Close the roof plan view. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system.Design. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. Creating a Piping System | 117 . In heating mode. In cooling mode. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 19 In the Project Browser. 25 Select the boiler. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. and bypasses the cooling tower. 26 Click Finish Editing System. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. 22 In the Select Connector dialog. under Design ➤ HVAC . 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and click OK. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. and select the cooling tower.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.

The hydronic supply system highlights in red. and click Select. and click OK. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. and click Properties. enter 0.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. expand Piping. you can view several parameters. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .8. You also manually modify the layout path as required. 29 Right-click CHWS. expand the Hydronic Return system category. indicating the logical connection. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. In the System Browser. including the flow rate and size of the component. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. 32 In the System Browser. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. 28 Using the same method. and click OK. for Water Flow. and click Expand All. and click Column Settings.

you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. click Check None. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). press Tab to highlight the system. 5 In the Filter dialog. click Training Files. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). you can place the cursor over a system component.HVAC Plan . When you draw a box to select components. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing.Design is highlighted.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and click OK. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. indicating that it’s the active view. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click to select it. select Mechanical Equipment. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. the boiler.Mech 330). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. A system preview displays in red. then the Select a System dialog displays. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

For Inset. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. 13 Click Cancel. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. It does not reference the architecture. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. or architectural components. verify that Solutions is selected. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. select CHWR. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. 11 On the Options Bar. select Perimeter. duct. enter 450. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. structural beams. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. 10 Click OK. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. click Settings.9 In the Select a System dialog.

Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. 19 In the drawing area. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. the flow for each WSHP is 0. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment.75 L/s. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. to display the path with thinner lines. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. With each Tab.16 Click Finish Layout. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. 17 Optionally. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. and press Tab 3 times.

Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. and access its instance properties.50 L/s. verify that the value for Flow is 1.50 L/s. notice that the Water Flow is 1. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. 24 Press Esc. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 22 Select the boiler.75 L/s). 23 Under Mechanical. and click OK. and click OK.

Logically.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. 27 On the System Tools panel.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. 32 Click Finish Editing System. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. double-click Level 1 . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . the Number of Elements is now 8.Design.HVAC Plan . On the Options Bar. 28 In the Project Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Edit System.

under Mechanical. Next. so the total flow of 6. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4. access its instance properties.94 L/s. as shown.50 L/s. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. 38 Using the same method. 35 Using the drag control. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Cancel. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6.44 L/s. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. note that the value for Flow is 4. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. which propagates flow throughout the system. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1.94 L/s. you physically close the CHWR loop.

The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. For Slope. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 40 In the Select a System dialog. select CHWS. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. enter 0. enter 450. select Perimeter 1 of 5. select a WSHP.00%. Click Settings. 41 Click OK. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . and then click OK. For Inset.

In a later exercise.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. 47 In the drawing area. 48 While pressing Ctrl. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path.45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. (Both sections are at the same elevation. 46 Click Modify.

Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. To create the piping system. or offset elevations are incorrect. as shown. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. 51 Click Finish Layout. or manually modify the pipe.49 Select the 4-way arrow control. Either relocate the system components. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . select a different layout solution. 50 Using the same method.

Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop.rvt.Design ➤ 3D Views.HVAC Plan . and the return pipes are magenta. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. as shown. NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. As you work in the training file. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .Design is highlighted. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . double-click 3D Building.

select the section of piping.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. as shown. 7 In the plan view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . 6 Press Delete. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector.

130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the boiler. Click to specify the reference point. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm. and press Esc to clear the selection. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. ■ Click to move the piping.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 9 In the 3D view.

and the boiler is connected to the return piping. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. 13 In the plan view. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. select the return pipe riser. and click Draw Pipe. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). and click OK. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. select the boiler. The connections are automatically created. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected.11 In the Select Connector dialog. 12 In the 3D view. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. and the lower one is secondary. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In.

and you select 1 connector. enter 600. Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. ■ Move the cursor down. enter 381. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.In a plan view. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. and press Enter. for Offset. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. 18 Press Esc twice. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. 19 In the plan view. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. As you place piping runs that are close together. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. and click OK.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. and the appropriate fittings are created. select the primary base mounted pump. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew.

134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Draw Pipe. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. you select the tee fitting. and click the minus symbol. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. and select it. and click to draw the pipe. right-click the bottom connector. as shown. 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee.

27 Move the cursor to the right. and when the connector point displays. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . click to connect to the pump.

32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . for Offset. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. right-click the discharge connector. and click Draw Pipe. and click to create the pipe. 31 On the Options Bar. select the primary base mounted pump. enter 1200. 29 If necessary.28 Press Esc. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections.

33 Press Esc. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . these pipe connections were created automatically. Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps.

138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. as shown. right-click the bottom control on the tee. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. 35 Using the method learned previously. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view.

and click to create the pipe. and press Enter. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown.■ Move the cursor down. type 300. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . for Offset. enter 2850. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

You now have a closed loop system.37 Click Modify. Next. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you validate the flow through the system.

Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view.44 L/s. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . under Mechanical. 46 Press Esc.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. and click OK. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. view the properties for the secondary pump. and click Element Properties. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. 43 Press Esc. 48 In the plan view. the value is 0 L/s. and click Element Properties. select the cooling tower. notice that Flow is 6. notice that under Mechanical. 42 Click OK. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. The flow is being propagated through the piping. under Mechanical. 41 Using the same method. right-click. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. 40 Click Cancel. right-click. for Cooling Water Flow. which is rounded up to 3. Connect the cooling tower Next.44 L/s). select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. When you create the pumps in parallel. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. In the Instance Properties dialog.50 or 50% of the Flow. 44 In the 3D view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. as shown.

142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). ■ Lower pipe (outlet).

51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6. select the cooling tower.44 L/s.Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 . and close the dialog. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. 50 In the 3D View. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. 49 Press Esc.

You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .HVAC Plan . you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. click Training Files. as shown. the water bypasses the cooling tower.rvt. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.52 Close the file with or without saving it. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . When the valve is open. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m. and is heated by the boiler. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Valves In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view.

verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. The bypass valve is closed by default. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. 8 Press Esc twice.4 On the Options Bar. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. and select M_Ball Valve . Adding Valves | 145 .50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down.

13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. place another M_Ball Valve . 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down.10 Press Esc.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 14 Using the same method. parallel to the previously placed valve. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 12 Select M_Ball Valve .

18 In the Instance Properties dialog. Adding Valves | 147 .44 L/s.15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. right-click. and click Element Properties. under Mechanical. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s. 19 Using the same method. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). verify that Flow is 0 L/s. Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. and click OK. validate that the Flow is 6.

You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. and select M_Ball Valve .44 L/s. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. click Training Files. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. 22 Using the method you just learned. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. and select M_Ball Valve . In the left pane of the Open dialog. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In heating mode. 20 Select the bypass valve. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Initially. validate that the Flow is 6.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters.44 L/s. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). Sizing Pipe In this exercise. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s.

8 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system.Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. click Pipe Color Fill . Sizing Pipe | 149 . Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values.Size.Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. as shown. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . select Pipe Color Fill . 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected.HVAC Plan .Flow. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. for Schemes. and click OK.

Click OK. select Friction. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. Select And. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. for Branch Sizing. enter 1. and enter 220 Pa/m.5 m/s. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. select a different layout solution. or manually modify the pipe. Either relocate the system components.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. and click to select the branch. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 13 Press Esc. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select Larger of Connector and Calculated. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. and for Velocity. Under Constraints. or offset elevations are incorrect.

click Training Files. Inspecting the System In this exercise. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. pressure. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. Inspecting the System | 151 . Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. Using the System Inspector. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system.14 Close the file with or without saving it.Design ➤ 3D Views. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler.rvt. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and double-click 3D Building.

flow. as shown. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). and pressure information including pressure loss.NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. An inspection flag reports the section number. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . This information helps you modify the system design. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. as required.

Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. the Static Pressure is 41916. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. 10 Click Finish. select 32° C. Checking Piping Systems | 153 .0 L/s. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project.Design ➤ Floor Plans. click Training Files.3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125. Warnings display.HVAC Plan . 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. you need to validate them. In this exercise.4 Pa. and to size pipe.1 Pa. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. targeting those systems that need attention. inspect Section 6 again. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. In the left pane of the Open dialog.7. and the Pressure Loss is 7160.Design. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.Note that the Flow is 1.rvt. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and double-click Level 3 . for Fluid Temperature. and click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 9 Using the same method. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m.

The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. As you learned when placing components. double-click Level 1 . you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system.HVAC Plan . you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. 7 In the System Browser. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. After you assign components to a system. After you have assigned all components to systems. and for pipe sizing. 4 In the System Browser. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. right-click the Systems titlebar. 6 In the Project Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). click Close. 12 In the System Browser. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. and confirm unassigned system components. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. 9 Right-click CHWS. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. and click Expand All. otherwise. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. and click Show to view all of the system components. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. the pipe is associated with that system. right-click Hydronic Return. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. In the System Browser. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. For example. If you place components without assigning them to a system. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations.NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description.Design floor plan. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors).HVAC Plan .Design. TIP If you have multiple views open. and select Level 3 . expand the Unassigned folder. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. thus assigning the components to a system. 10 Using the same methods. and click View.

Checking Piping Systems | 155 . confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system.13 Right-click CHWR. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. 14 Using the methods that you learned. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems.

156 .

157 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

158 .

Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 . you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Define required lighting. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. distribution systems.04. ■ Click New Correction Factor. select Wiring Types.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. For Material. enter 70. enter 1. and demand factors that are applied in the design. wiring. You also add a wiring type. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name. As you place components and create circuits. speeding up the design phase. Select Correction Factor.rvt. For Factor. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. ■ ■ For Material.Wire Sizes. expand Wiring . For Temperature. select 90. enter THHN. Click OK. click Training Files. click (Open). select Copper. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. In this exercise you review electrical settings. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. select Copper.

select THHN. By specifying a range. select Single. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. For Conduit Type. select Distribution Systems. select 75. select Power. enter 1. For Value. select Demand Factors. enter 250. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . enter 240. Click Split. For Insulation. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. For L-G Voltage. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. select 10000 VA. enter 220. select Voltage Definitions. For Neutral Multiplier. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. select 240. enter 2000. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. enter 240. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter 120/240. For Maximum. select Steel. select 120. select Hot Conductor Size. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size. select 3. enter 50. For Phase.0. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. For L-L Voltage. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. For Max Size. Click OK. For Minimum. For Wires. Under More Than. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name.

The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces.Design ➤ Floor Plans. restrooms. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. enter Required Lighting Level. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . and double-click Level 2 . then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. For Discipline. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. select Illuminance. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. select Electrical .Lighting group in the space element properties. click Training Files. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. and conference rooms.Lighting Plan. In this case the key style is the type of space and. For Type of Parameter. 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . click Add. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. Verify that Instance is selected. click (Open). under the Electrical . 5 In the drawing area. zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218. its value becomes the Required Lighting Level.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. select Electrical. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. select Spaces.rvt. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. Later in the tutorial. For Group Parameter Under. Click OK twice. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. such as offices. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. Under Categories. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level).Lighting.

15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select Spaces. enter Lighting Levels. Click OK. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Electrical .6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. under Available Fields. note the Required Lighting Level parameter. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. Click OK. double-click Required Lighting Level. enter Open Office.Lighting. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. enter 485. For Name. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Select Schedule Keys. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. and for Key Name. 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category. and click OK. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. enter Space Lighting Requirements.

Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. which is mapped to project units. click Edit. 21 Click OK twice. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. Notice that as you enter the data. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type. Select Blank Line. select Required Lighting Level. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.Lighting Plan. for Sorting/Grouping. 22 Using the same method. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . change the sort order back to the default setting.

the value input applies only to the selected space. select Instruction-Standard. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. click (Open). 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Lighting Levels. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. 27 Click OK. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. under Identity Data. that Required Lighting Level is blank. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. Later in this exercise. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. In this exercise. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Note that under Electrical-Lighting.

for Name. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200. enter Required Lighting Levels. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. and press ENTER. verify the By Range is selected. and press ENTER. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes.00. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition.00 lx. Select the scheme for 500 lx. Under Schemes. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add. and press Enter. click Training Files. ■ Click OK. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after.00 lx. and click (Add Value) five times.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.00 lx. Select the scheme for 450. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. enter 900. enter 200. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. and in the At Least column.00. enter Required Lighting and click OK. click (Duplicate).rvt. For Color. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. 00 lx still selected. for Category. then the new value will be 400 lx. select Required Lighting Level. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown. select Spaces. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. and click (Add Value). For example. enter 800. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . for Title. click (Add Value) again. Select the scheme for At Least 20.

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Name. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. and Required Lighting Level. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 . select Electrical. double-click Number. Click OK.Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. 8 In the drawing area. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Average Estimated Illumination.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. select Spaces. select Required Lighting. enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. Level. enter Lighting Delta. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and double-click Level 2 .Lighting CF. For Type. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. select Illuminance. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. For Discipline. select Spaces. For Color Scheme. 13 Click Calculated Value. for Available Fields. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . Name.

select Not Between. select Red. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. Click OK. For Value. On the Formatting tab. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. for Fields. Click OK twice. for Test. Click Conditional Format. under Condition. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Level. for Sort by. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. select Lighting Delta. press the spacebar. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab.■ For Formula. type a hyphen. Click OK three times. select Average Estimated Illumination. and click Browse. for Custom Colors. Click Background Color. click Browse. Select Blank Line. Select Header. for Formula. select Required Lighting Level. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog.

The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 . 16 Close the file with or without saving it.

170 .

These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. Create power loads. Then. First. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. Create a panel schedule. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. 171 . as you place lighting fixtures. Use the System Browser to check your design. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. power circuits. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values.

In the Color dialog.Lighting CF view is open. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements.rvt. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. select the color for Less Than 200 lx. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 .Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 8 In the Project Browser. select the color legend. Click OK. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. click (Open). 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. 7 In the Project Browser. select Average Estimated Illumination. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx. for the Spaces Category. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .Lighting Ceiling plan.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. Under Scheme Definition. for Basic Colors. click Training Files. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . By using orange as the color for this range. You can create additional color schemes. 2 In the drawing area. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. select Orange.

Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. which is the lowest value in the specified range. 13 Click the Level 2 . Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. zoom to space Library 219. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format).

277V. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend.the +/. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 18 Click to place the fixture. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared.5 fc range is satisfied.5 fc range. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. the fixtures will move accordingly. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

■ Under Electrical Loads. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx. enter 162. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. scroll to view space space Library 219. In the Name dialog. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. for Name enter and click OK. for Apparent Load.00 VA. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

enter . click Training Files. Placing Switches. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. you add switches.00 lm. and Receptacles | 183 . Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. for Color Preset. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. ■ Click OK twice.ies and click Open. for Lamp. click the value for Initial Intensity. click (Open). enter F15. Under Photometrics. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. select 463T5_S. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. select Luminous Flux. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog.93. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. Junction Boxes. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. for Ballast Loss Factor. ■ Click Apply. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. junction boxes. Under Photometrics. In the Select File dialog. 9 In space Library 219. and receptacles to your design. select the top center fixture.rvt. for Type Mark. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. Under Electrical. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. specify 15000. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated.85. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. select Xenon and click OK. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Click OK. click the value for Light Loss Factor. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. ■ Under Photometrics. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. Under Photometrics. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. select T5 [HO]. Placing Switches. 2 In the drawing area. Junction Boxes. In the next exercise. enter . 12 Close the file with or without saving it. click the value for Initial Color. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule.

6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.277V. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor .3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 7 Click to place the switch. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.

13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. Placing Switches. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. The element type M_Junction Boxes .NoLoad.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. and Receptacles | 185 .rfa and click Open. 12 In the Load Family dialog. 9 Press ESC to end the command. Junction Boxes.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. Select M_Junction Boxes .

Offset. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. for Level 2 .14 Press ESC to end the command. note the Number of Poles is 1.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. In the Type Properties dialog. 15 Select the junction box. Click Edit Type. for Mark. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. enter 2750. 21 In the drawing area. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . zoom to space Library 219. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . enter JB-1NL. NOTE When entering values. Under Electrical. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Click OK twice. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. note that Apparent Load is set to 0.

Space Name. Junction Boxes. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. NOTE If necessary. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Distribution System. 24 For any column. right-click and click Column Settings. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Expand General. Expand Electrical. Select Load. Click OK. 23 In the System Browser. Space Number. and Voltage. Placing Switches. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. and Receptacles | 187 . Select Size. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. 26 In the System Browser. and Number of Elements.

29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 31 Close the System Browser. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

move the cursor along the wall. Junction Boxes. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 189 . select Copy and Multiple. 41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 40 On the Options Bar. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. and enter 3650 and press ENTER. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 38 Select the receptacle.

enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle.42 Move the cursor down. 43 Press ESC to end the command. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 191 . 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. Junction Boxes.

Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .48 Close the file with or without saving it. you need to create logical connections to define the topology.

then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. zoom to the space Electrical 220. 2 In the drawing area. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m. Adding wiring to a project is optional. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP).208V MCB .rvt. 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.Surface: 100A. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment.equipment. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . click (Open). and work toward the higher voltage. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.

15 On the Options Bar.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown.Loads. for Distribution System. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. select 480/277 Wye. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical .5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. enter 20. 8 Select the panelboard. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. #1 Pole Breakers. Click OK. enter LP-2B. For Panel Name. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Max. 9 On the Options Bar. select 120/208 Wye. #1 Pole Breakers. for Distribution System. Click OK. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Panel Name. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.480V MCB . 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Loads. enter 20. 14 Select the panelboard. enter PP-2B. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . for Max.

Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. which is the logical connection between the elements. 20 In the drawing area. and for Category. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. zoom to space Instruction 221. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. click Check None. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. Click OK. 23 In the Filter dialog.

The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way.27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 28 Press ESC to end the command.

33 Select the switch on the right. 32 Press ESC.31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down.

35 Select the left three-way switch. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 38 Press ESC to end the command. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.

Click OK. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. and for Category.39 Using the same method. select Wires. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. enter 2. for Hot Conductors. Click OK. Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. click Training Files.rvt. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Open). except without wire. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and create permanent wiring. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Next you create circuits without showing wire. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Check None.Loads. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 42 In the Filter dialog. 2 In the drawing area.

13 In the System Browser. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. and verify that Load. right-click on the Systems heading. and then expand circuit 1. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Voltage. and Voltage Drop are selected. Expand Electrical. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. expand Power. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. Rating. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. Distribution System. Click OK.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit.

Click OK. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. Click Tags. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. change the Voltage to 277V. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 30 Close the System Browser. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 22 With the junction box still selected. under Electrical. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.

48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. click below the first one to place it. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. enter FR4. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. for Type Mark. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . under Identity Data. Click OK. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 35 Press ESC to end the command. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . Click Yes. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. notice the label parameters and click Cancel. click Edit Type. select Break. 47 In the drawing area. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. For Circuit Number. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 40 Click OK twice.

52 In the Save As dialog. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. enter a comma. Next you create a switch system. 54 Select all of the tags. for File Name. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m. Click OK. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 57 In the Filter dialog. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Click Save.rfa. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. Click OK. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. click (Open). 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .rvt. and click Apply. and for Category. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Click OK. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. click Check None. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select Lighting Fixture Tags.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix.

10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 2 In the drawing area. for Switch ID. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. Click OK. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. enter a. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. under Electrical Lighting. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 9 Select the occupancy sensor.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.

20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. for switch ID. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System.Lighting. under Electrical . 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. enter b.

7 In space Electrical 220. select the PP-2B panel. enter 2. click Training Files. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. 2 In the drawing area. Next you create a circuit and size wire. Creating Power Loads | 207 . 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. for Hot Conductors. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. click Check None. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. and for Category. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. 4 In the Filter dialog. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires.26 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Open). Click OK. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. select Electrical Fixtures. under Electrical . 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel.rvt. and click Element Properties. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. and data systems. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Circuits are used for power.Loads. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. In the left pane of the Open dialog. lighting.

press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. 19 Click OK. and click Open. and click to select the circuit. and in the drawing area.rfa. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. and in the right pane. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Wiring. for Ground Wire Tick Mark.13 Select the wire again. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark.

24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. select the PP-2B panel.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Creating Power Loads | 209 . as shown. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. 28 In the drawing area. 29 In space Instruction 221. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. as shown. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. 22 In space Electrical 220. in space Instruction 221. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 26 Press Delete. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. click the connector of the first receptacle.

210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. Next you balance the loads for your design.Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221.

rvt. click Training Files. 1-#10. 2 In the drawing area. select panel LP-2B. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Had there been a greater imbalance. After re-balancing loads. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. 3 In the Electrical space. Click OK. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. Scroll down. the distribution is shifted. 1-#12.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. enter 30A. click Open. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. for Rating. In the left pane of the Open dialog. zoom to space Electrical 220. 1-#10. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. click Rebalance Loads. Under Electrical-Loads. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Finally. 6 Click OK. 1-#12.

Next you create a panel schedule. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 17 Close the warning dialog. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. enter 40A. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 15 Select panel PP-2B. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected.Loads.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. and click OK. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. and click OK. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. 14 Close the warning dialog. and click Finish Editing Circuit. under Electrical . The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. under Electrical . for Rating.Loads. enter 25A. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 24 Click Select Panel. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. select the transformer TP-2B. for Rating.

Panel Schedules. click Edit. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project.rvt. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. Select PP-2B. under Other. for Font Size. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. Under Body Text. enter 4 mm. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. select Berlin Sans FB. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. 10 Click OK twice. Under Header Text. for Font. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. Click OK. and open E601 . 4 Close the report. for Appearance.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. click (Open). 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. enter 5 mm. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. Under Header Text. expand Sheets (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. The Panel Schedule Report displays. for Font Size. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. select Bold and Italic. 6 In the Project Browser. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. 5 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.

each with a load of 180VA. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open). 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. In the System Browser. Expand Unassigned. click Training Files. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall.rvt. select space Lounge 212. press TAB once. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit.

Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. 20 On the Options Bar. In the System Browser. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. Checking Your Design | 215 . 18 Select panel LP-2C. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. select MDP-1. under Warnings. 15 In the dialog. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 16 Close the details dialog. 17 In the drawing area. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. zoom to space Electrical 214. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. for Panel. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.

216 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 .

218 .

In this lesson.Plumbing Plan . 219 .Vent. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. click Training Files. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type.rvt. In this exercise. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and click OK. right-click PVC . in addition to loading existing families. type PVC . and verify that Level 1 .Sanitary. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. click Duplicate. planning is critical to a successful design. 4 In the Name dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design is open. and click Properties. 2 In the Project Browser. Adding a pipe size. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m. you create a PVC pipe type.

for Material. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. under Mechanical. for Nominal.DWV: Standard. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. enter 54. and open Metric\M_Trap P . click Modify. 10 On the Selection panel. select Branch.Sch 40 . The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. 15 For System Type. click Training Files. Cross.PVC . click Pipe Settings. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. 25 For Outside. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. 22 Click New Size. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.rfa. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 27 For the new pipe size. select Tee. enter 45. select M_Tee Sanitary . select Plastic.293 mm. enter 46. 26 Click OK. 24 For Inside Diameter. Tee. enter 10°. enter -1250. 17 In the left pane. under Pipe Types.5 In the Type Properties dialog. select Sanitary. 21 In the right pane. select None. and click Main.Sch 40 .006 mm. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. PVC . Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. For Offset.Vent is listed. and click OK. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent . 13 In the right panel. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. 6 Click OK. select Sanitary. Tap.PVC . NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.Sch 40 . verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. In the Project Browser.DWV. 18 For System Type. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main.PVC . 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog.DWV: Standard. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 28 Close the file with or without saving it.000 mm.

sanitary piping. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. 221 . and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. add a hot water heater. vent. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. including plumbing fixtures. Create the sanitary plumbing system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. Create the cold water system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. Create the hot water system. and hot and cold water piping.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. 16 In the Select a System dialog.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. A preview of the piping layout displays. and click OK. a toilet. select Sanitary 107. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . for example. The base is placed. select one of the components in the system. as shown. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. at the midpoint of the detail lines.

and click Settings.05%. for Diameter. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. click Solutions. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. enter -350 mm. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. enter 1. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. select Intersections. 21 On Options Bar. 27 For Offset. enter -350 mm. 28 On the Options Bar. 30 Click Modify. and for Offset. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. for Slope. 23 For Pipe Type. select PVC . select PVC . select 100 mm.Sanitary. 26 For Pipe Type.19 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 24 For Offset. for Solution Type. and modify it to meet project requirements.Sanitary. select Branch. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. select Main. enter -1225. 25 In the left pane. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. You accept this suggested solution. 29 On the Options Bar. The default settings are automatically modified.

select the vertical route path segments. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . 32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl.

34 Click Modify. use the ViewCube to orient the view.33 In the 3D view. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. as shown.

click Finish Layout.36 Using the previous method. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. 37 On the Generate Layout panel.

Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing . and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.Overall. select the fitting and click to reorient it. When a fitting is reversed. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain. 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.

The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. adding sinks in the men’s room. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. you continue with the work from the last exercise. and check the slope control.

select 560 mmx560 mm . under M_Lavatory . 4 On the Element panel.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Plumbing Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line. 5 On the Placement panel. and verify that Level 1 . click Training Files. in the Type Selector. as shown. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Rectangular.Design is open. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.Public.

On the Options Bar. and press Enter to create a second sink. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. enter 711.7 Click Modify. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point.2. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . select Multiple. 8 Select the sink.

Press Esc. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107.■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. click Add To System. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 711. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 12 In the drawing area. 11 In the System Browser. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system.2. and press Enter to create the third sink.

and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. 20 Select the fitting. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system.Design ➤ 3D Views.Overall. use the ViewCube to orient the view. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. double-click 3D Plumbing . Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. as shown. 21 Select the tee. click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 19 In the 3D view.16 On the Edit System panel. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . under Design ➤ Plumbing .

press Spacebar. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. for Slope. enter 1. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 24 On the Options Bar.05%. for Offset. enter 760 mm. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Draw Pipe. with the tee fitting selected. and click to draw the pipe. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector).22 In the plan view. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. 26 On the Options Bar. 27 Click Modify. When you press the Spacebar. and click Apply.

31 Click Modify.Sch 40 . under M_Wye 45 Deg Double . 30 In the 3D view. 32 Select the double wye fitting. click to place the fitting. move the cursor over the stub pipe.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.DWV. select Standard. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 .PVC . and when the vertical center line displays. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. 29 In the Type Selector.

on the Options Bar. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. you add pipe segments to the double wye. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. for Offset. enter 305 mm. double-click the section head to open the section view. 36 In the section view.33 With the fitting selected. and press Enter. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In the next steps. enter 150 mm. and press Enter. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the right connector. 37 Select the fitting. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. zoom in to the double wye fitting. 34 Press Esc.

41 Using the same method. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 40 Click Modify. 42 Click Modify. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. and click to place the pipe. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 .

enter 150 mm. right-click the bottom connector. 48 Click Modify. press Spacebar. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. and click Draw Pipe. 46 In the section view. 47 Move the cursor down. and press Esc. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 49 Using the same method.

select Standard. 55 In the 3D view.DWV. 56 Using the same method. 53 Using the same method. 54 Click Modify. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks.PVC . You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. select the P-Trap on the left.Sch 40 . You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 51 In the Type Selector. 52 In the plan view. under M_Trap P .

enter 150 mm. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. 58 Using the same method. and click Draw Pipe. Move the cursor to the left. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Click in the plan view. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Enter. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. Select the double wye pipe on the left. select the left P-Trap.. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. In the plan view.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Click Modify. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. connect the right sink to the double wye.

under Pipe Types.■ In the 3D view. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. as shown. In the Type Selector. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. and select a proposed solution. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. select PVC Sanitary. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. select the section of pipe you just drew. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. Press Esc. while pressing Ctrl. click Finish to select the recommended solution. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . while pressing Ctrl. On the Routing Solutions panel.

63 On the Slope Editor panel. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . You have appropriately sloped the pipe.05% is selected. and verify the slope. verify that 1.rvt. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. for Slope. click Finish. 62 On the Options Bar. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. adjusting the sanitary stack.

and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. select Standard. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 .Overall. right-click the top connector. 5 Select the tee. under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend . 3 In the Section view. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select the vertical stack.Design. and click Draw Pipe.Design. 10 In the 3D view.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Type Selector.Floor level line. and click the intersection to place the fitting. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. select the elbow fitting on the right. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and click to draw the pipe.PVC .DWV. as shown.Sch 40 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 7 On the Selection panel. click Modify. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 .Plumbing Plan . and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool.43 In the 3D view. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. In this tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. You create a new pipe type. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. click Training Files. In this lesson. and click Duplicate. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. 267 . NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.autodesk. go to http://www.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model.rvt. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. 2 Right-click Standard. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. If the tutorial training files are not present. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. After finishing each exercise. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. However. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. you can choose to save your work. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model.

select Carbon Steel. you create project parameters and work with schedules. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. and click Properties. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. In the next exercise. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. In this exercise. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. select Fire Protection Wet. structural beams. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. verify that 2800 is selected. for Material. you modify the type properties of the pipe. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. select Main. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. duct. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. select Fire Protection Wet. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. For System Type. However. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. For Offset. under Mechanical. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. verify that 2800 is specified. click Rename. 6 In the Project Browser. In the left pane. For Offset. For Pipe Type. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. For System Type. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. and then click OK. Next. 9 Click OK. or architectural components. and enter Fire Protection Wet. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. For Pipe Type. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch.

select Spaces. for Sprinkler Zone. select the upper half of the building. click Training Files. right-click. and then click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. Under Categories. 5 Click OK twice. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. enter Zone 1. click Add. under Fire Protection. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. When you highlight a space using the cursor. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. 6 In the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose.Fire Protection Piping Plan . enter Sprinkler Zone.Design is highlighted. for Name. select Fire Protection.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. select space Instruction 221 as shown. For Group parameter under.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Element Properties. the space crossing lines display. 8 Using a crossing window.

select Zone 1. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. and then click OK. you create schedules for sprinkler design. under Fire Protection. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Fire Protection. and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then access instance properties. 13 Using the same method. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click OK. including a calculated value parameter. verify that only Spaces are selected.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Sprinkler Zone. to which you add various parameters. click Training Files. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. enter Zone 2. 10 In the Filter dialog.rvt. for Sprinkler Zone.

6 Using the same method. enter Light. For Key name. For Group parameter under. For Name. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Type of Parameter.Design is highlighted. and click Field Format. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. for Name. Obstructed-Combustible.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Click OK. double-click on each column separator. 7 Click OK. select Fire Protection. For Rounding. 9 On the Formatting tab. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column.Fire Protection Piping Plan . click Add Parameter. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. The schedule displays. For Units. 14 Select the new header. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Click OK. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. select Length. and on the ribbon. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. 11 Click OK twice. indicating that it’s the active view. 10 In the Format dialog. enter Protection Area Construction Type. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 .Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. Select Schedule keys. select Millimeters. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. select Maximum Spacing. enter Maximum Spacing. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. select mm. click the Formatting tab. select Spaces. For Unit symbol. select 0 decimal places.

select Spaces. enter 40. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. enter 4575. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 16 Using the same method. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Unobstructed Ordinary. Click OK. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. enter Sprinkler Schedule. For Name. In the Maximum Coverage Area column. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. Unobstructed Extra. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. and press Enter. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.

For Discipline. select 0 decimal place. 20 On the Formatting tab. Click OK. and click Field Format. For Formula. For Rounding. select Fixed. select Common. select Number. Enter the formula operator / after Area. under Available fields. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements.Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. and click OK. For Units. enter Minimum Sprinklers. 22 Click OK twice. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. In the Fields dialog. select Area. For Type. 19 Click the Formatting tab. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). click . Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Minimum Sprinklers. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings.

and click View Properties. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. For Fields. select Sprinkler Zone. select Level. select Grand totals. At the bottom of the dialog. verify that Use default settings is selected. under Other. For Then by. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Under Field formatting. Select Header and Blank line. Select Header and Blank line. for Sorting/Grouping. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. and select Totals only. click Edit. and then select Hidden field.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. select Number. and then click Field Format. select Hidden field. ■ In the Format dialog. For Fields. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Level. for Sort by. 26 Click OK 3 times. For Then by (second instance). select Sprinkler Zone.

click Edit. select Level equals Level 2. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. and click View Properties. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. for Embedded Schedule. select Calculate totals. under Other. and click View Properties. for Filter. select Grand totals. select Embedded Schedule. double-click Type. and Count. For Category. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. right-click the schedule. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. select Count. for Filter by. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Under Field formatting.27 In the drawing area. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. click Edit. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. delete the word Maximum. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. On the Formatting tab. select Sprinklers. for Available fields. 30 Click OK twice. System Name. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. and select Totals only. for Fields.

use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. select space 221 Instruction. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. 52 Click OK. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Protection Area Construction Type. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. 50 Access the instance properties. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. 43 Click Cancel. for Protection Area Construction Type. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. and the spacing parameter values are evident. select Light. and access the instance properties. 41 In the plan view. double-click FP .Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. select Ordinary. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. Unobstructed. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 44 In the schedule. select space 221 Instruction.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . under Identity Data. Unobstructed. under Identity Data. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. 46 With the space still selected. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. select Ordinary. and click OK. but their values are not determined. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. Unobstructed. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. As a result. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. 48 In the floor plan.Fire Protection Plan Design. under Identity Data.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. By following the recommended workflow. you will understand the process.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. and double-click Level 2 . This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. After finishing each exercise. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. However.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. methodology. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. go to http://www. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. you can choose to save your work. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. 279 . If the tutorial training files are not present.autodesk. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. As you create the system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . At the end of this tutorial. As you place the sprinklers.

When there is a small misalignment. After placing the initial sprinkler. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. 3 In the Project Browser. When this happens. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers.

11 In the drawing area. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. Also. 13 On the Options Bar. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. verify that Constrain is cleared. and 207.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . as shown. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. select the sprinklers that you placed. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. and click to place 3 sprinklers. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. 10 Press Esc twice. 206. while pressing Ctrl. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. 9 In space Instruction 202. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

Fire Protection Piping Plan . you place non-hosted sprinklers. Next.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. 17 In the Project Browser. as shown. you place non-hosted sprinklers. Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point.Design.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. and then press Esc. 200B. and 200C). 18 Type WT. open Design ➤ FP . specify a vertical offset.

Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). 30 Close the file with or without saving it.FP_Ceiling view.0. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. you adjust the offset. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . for Offset. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. enter 2900 mm. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. In this exercise. and with piping (physical connection). zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. under Constraints. After creating the logical connection. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. enter 11. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. For Number. enter 4100. and press Enter. and then creating the logical connection between these system components.19 In the floor plan. Next. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. Notice that the schedule updates. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. 29 Press Esc. 25 Click OK. and click Element Properties. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. move the cursor to the right. This number is determined in the schedule. In the next exercise.

5 Right-click the header. 1 In the Project Browser. However. indicating that it’s the active view. click View ➤ Systems. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. As you assign sprinklers to systems. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. as shown. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. Unlike logical connections (systems).rvt. and select Piping. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area.pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping.Design is highlighted.Fire Protection Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. and click Select. within the Piping Systems folder. and select the system. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and assign the selected sprinklers to it.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. Next. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. named Fire Protection Wet. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . indicating the logical connection. Creating a Piping System | 285 . place the cursor over a sprinkler. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. In the System Browser. select an initial piping layout. press Tab. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. 11 With the system still selected. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial.

286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for Diameter. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch.Wet is selected. For Offset. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. providing system editing tools. and number of elements in the system. 19 Click OK. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. 12 On the Options Bar. select Branch. 13 In the System Browser. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 23 For Offset. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. click Solutions. click Place Base. When the layout is finished.The Edit Piping System panel displays. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. select 150 mm. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name.0 is specified. for System Name. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. The Generate Layout tools are activated. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 24 On the Generate Layout panel. 22 On the Options Bar. enter FP Wet_Zone2. 14 Click Finish Editing System. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. verify that Main is selected. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. In the left pane. as shown. and a piping layout preview displays. system equipment. and on the Options Bar. click Settings. 15 In the drawing area. verify that 2800. enter -3650. For Pipe Type.

(elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction.25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. A (parallel movement control) displays. Creating a Piping System | 287 . 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. On the Generate Layout panel. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. and green represents branch lines). Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. In general. verify that Network is selected. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. click Modify. and select solution 4. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview.

31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. as shown. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Either relocate the system components. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . or manually modify the pipe. select a different layout solution. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. 32 If necessary. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 29 Click Finish Layout. or that offset elevations are incorrect.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing.

and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m.rvt. and select the elbow fitting as shown. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. 3 If necessary. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and various manual pipe creation tools. and then you create piping to physically connect them. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. the Connect Into tool. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. 1 In the Project Browser.Fire Protection Piping Plan . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . 2 Zoom in.33 Close the file with or without saving it.Design is highlighted. Next. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them.

click Finish Editing System. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). or a system component to display system tools. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. click Add To System. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. mechanical equipment. and pipe or duct is created. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. radiators. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. and so on) are logically connected by a system. 5 In the drawing area. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. 9 On the Edit System panel. you can select the pipe or duct. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. 8 In the corridor. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . air terminals. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system.

23 View the result in the 3D view. 18 Click Finish Editing System. and select solution 5. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. verify that Network is selected. 13 Click Finish Layout. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. verify that Solutions is selected. 21 In the Piping Plan. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. for Solution Type. 14 Close the System Browser. 12 On the Options Bar. and then tile the views. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler.11 On the Generate Layout panel. 20 Open Design ➤ FP . Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping.

select 2800.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down.24 In the Piping Plan. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . and then press Esc. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for Offset. 27 On the Options Bar. right-click. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 29 Using the same method. and click Draw Pipe. draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe. 25 Select the sprinkler. 28 In the drawing area.

3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 On the Options Bar. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. click Training Files. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. for Scale.rvt. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 . select 1 : 50. 31 In the plan view. indicating that it’s the active view. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. Because the whole system highlights. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise.Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner.Fire Protection Piping Plan .

and click View Properties. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.6 Press Esc. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 8 Right-click. double-click on the section head to open the section view.

Design. 12 If necessary.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. 14 Select the tee fitting. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. and then click Modify. Click OK. 22 In the drawing area. 10 In the Project Browser. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . and select Hose Reel Cabinet . For Default View Template. and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter. enter FP Section_Stair. for View Name. and click Apply Default View Template. 17 Move the cursor up. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown. for Sub-Discipline.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 19 Make Level 2 . drag the top section boundary line up. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Design.Design the active view. right-click Design ➤ FP . select MEP Section. 13 Select the elbow fitting. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. select FP . Under Identity Data. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 15 Press Spacebar. and then right-click the top connector.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. enter 2135.Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. For View Classification.Fire Protection Plan .

28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps). 26 On the Options Bar. select . and then click Modify. zoom to the hose reel cabinet.23 In the section view.Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. for Diameter. right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet. 25 Verify that Fire Protection . 27 On the Placement Tools panel. verify that Automatically Connect is active. and click Draw Pipe. 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 24 Select the cabinet.

click Yes to load a family. 31 In the alert dialog. and click Open. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 . 33 In the Type Selector. 32 In the Open dialog. and then click Modify.29 Close the section view. A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm. verify that M_Gate Valve . Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.50 mm is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet. as shown.rfa.

and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally.Design ➤ 3D Views. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown.35 Open 3D Fire Protection. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. click Training Files. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers.

height. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. 8 Click Modify. select 25mm. for Diameter. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view. or height. and click OK. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. width. or width. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. width. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Changing the diameter. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. All selected piping is now 1" diameter. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. 7 On the Options Bar. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. 6 In the Filter dialog. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). click Check None.

select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet. 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. NOTE Tags are view specific. 18 In the 3D view.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 12 If necessary. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. By hiding the linked file. They display only in the view in which they were placed. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. 17 On the View Control Bar. and after each segment highlights. select the linked architectural file. . and click Open. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. Press Esc. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected.rfa. Clear Leader. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. click to place the tag.

21 On the Options Bar. and when the section highlights. for Diameter. The main piping is selected and displays in red. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 . The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. select 100mm. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. press Tab.

23 Close the 3D view. as shown. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 24 In the drawing area. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. 25 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. 26 Using the same method. select 40mm. and then tag the piping as shown. The pipe diameter is modified. and maximize the floor plan.

Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. For additional practice. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. you created a wet fire protection system. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. In this tutorial. You added tags to pipes. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. In this exercise. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria.

304 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. 305 . and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. create details.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. add annotations and dimensions.

306 .

callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. dependent views. and click Rename. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 2 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If the view included detail graphics. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 307 . you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. right-click Copy of Level 1. and view references.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. matchlines. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser.rvt. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Properties. and apply a view template.

rvt. views and put them on the sheet. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. 9 Click OK. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. and click Rename.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and click OK. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. more focused. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. 4 Using the same method. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 10 In the drawing area. 7 Close the file without saving. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. as shown. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. and click Apply Default View Template. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. 6 In the Project Browser. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and then press Esc. create dependent views for areas B and C. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. and click OK. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A.

For Line Pattern. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. select Double Dash . Click OK. click the current value. and click OK. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select black. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. and then press Esc. select 11. 13 Press Esc twice. 14 Click Finish Matchline. For Line Weight. In the Color dialog. 19 In the drawing area.

24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 21 Using the same method. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. on the Options Bar. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. for Target view. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 25 Using the same method. as shown.20 Select the upper view reference and.

3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. For Default View Template. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 27 Using the same method. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. 4 In the Project Browser. and zoom to each of the view references. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for View Name.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. 2 Zoom in. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. select Plumbing Isometric. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter Plumbing Isometric . and select the section box. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. click Training Files. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . 29 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Domestic Water.rvt. right-click 3D Plumbing. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

select Plumbing. 6 In the Project Browser. select Documentation. 10 Right-click. and click Apply Default View Template.Domestic Water. For Sub-Discipline. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. Click Apply. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run.■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. The section crop lines no longer display. and then click OK. select Dash. for View Classification. Click OK. 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. right-click Plumbing Isometric . For Pattern. select 3. and click to select it.

13 Using the same method. and click to select it. press Tab 3 times. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater.

This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view.14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. 15 Right-click. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click to select it. as shown). and click Hide in View ➤ Elements.

create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing.16 Press Esc. 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and for Default View Template.Sanitary Waste. rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . On the View Control Bar. 18 Label the fixtures as shown. verify that Common is selected. For Slope. and in the Type Selector.5mm Arial. click on the Format value. ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline. select 1. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . and in the view properties. 19 Using methods learned previously. specify Plumbing .Isometric.

■ In the Format dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 Press Esc twice. you use a plan view to create a callout view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. and then place the callout view on a sheet. for Rounding. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. and click to place the spot slope annotation. as shown. 22 Click OK twice.rvt. select To the nearest 10. When the view is associated with a sheet. click Training Files. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. 27 Close the file with or without saving it.

and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. Creating Callout Views | 317 . 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. select 1 : 50. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout.2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. for Scale. 5 On the Options Bar.

HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. drag it to the sheet. select 5. Expand the Callout Boundary category and. double-click M601 . ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. Click OK.Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Line Weight. and select the viewport. under Sheets (all). 13 In the Project Browser. 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . using the same method.

17 In the Project Browser. Click OK. enter WSHP PART PLAN. and click Apply Default View Template. right-click the callout view. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Default View Template. For Title on Sheet.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for View Name. Creating Callout Views | 319 . The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information.

19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section.

28 In the Apply View Template dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . right-click the detail view. enter Typical WSHP Detail. and click OK. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and click Apply View Template.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click OK. 26 In the Rename View dialog.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. and click Rename. Creating Callout Views | 321 . 29 Close the file with or without saving it. under Names. 25 In the Project Browser. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy.

322 .

2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. linetypes.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. click Training Files. Creating Annotations In this exercise. duct tags. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. symbols.rvt. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. and annotation to create a legend. 323 . as shown. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. work with model-based components.

and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. and select 1. 8 With the text still selected. 9 Press Esc twice. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center).

Creating Annotations | 325 . verify that Leader is cleared. and a segment of rectangular duct.Add leaders 10 Select the text box. a return diffuser. and then click Right Straight. a segment of round duct. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. 16 In the drawing area. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. as shown. The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. select a supply diffuser. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. 15 On the Options Bar.

21 In the Load Family dialog. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. for Ducts. and click OK. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. 25 In the drawing area. 22 In the Tags dialog. as shown. and click Open. If necessary. 24 On the Options Bar. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. you can annotate the element with a second tag type.17 Click Modify. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . under Category.rfa. clear Leader. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. 20 In the Tags dialog.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. click Load.

open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 31 On the Options Bar. Creating Annotations | 327 . 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. select Horizontal. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. 32 In the drawing area. Leader.26 On the Options Bar. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. and Attached End. and then press Esc.

33 On the Options Bar. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. for Leader. select Free End. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 34 In the drawing area. 36 Press Esc twice. then click to the right to place the leader as shown. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. as shown.

37 In the drawing area. not simply an instance property. That’s because you changed a type property. indicating that it’s the active view. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. and lock lighting fixtures. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. and click OK. for Leader Arrowhead. 40 Using the method learned previously. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. you use temporary dimensions to locate. select the last tag placed. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan.rvt. lay out. Creating Dimensions | 329 . Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. and all elements of that type are affected.

On the Options Bar. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. select the dimension line. 14 Using the same method. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 13 Press Esc. 12 Click EQ. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. and then select the interior face of the wall.5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures.

21 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 Press Esc. and offset them from the wall. Creating a Legend In this exercise. enter 2430. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. annotation symbols. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. and press Enter. click the 3 interior locks on the line. Creating a Legend | 331 . linework. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 20 Using the same methods.rvt.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. 19 Select the dimension value (3376. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m.9). Because the dimensions are locked. and notes. click Training Files. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints.

select Floor Plan. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter Diffuser Legend. select 1 : 50. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . 10 Using the same method. and select 1. For Scale.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Click OK. 5 Click in the drawing area. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family.200 Neck. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . For View.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click below the title to place the diffuser. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . ■ 9 In the drawing area.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend.

11 Press Esc. 14 In the drawing area. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. Creating a Legend | 333 . and select 1. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click next to the top diffuser. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment.

21 Press Esc. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 22 Zoom in to the copied component.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.RISE symbol for the copy start point. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 24 Select the component’s break line. 26 Press Esc. The selected detail lines are now thin. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .DROP symbol to specify the copy end point.DROP and its text note. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . and then press Esc. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

and then click Modify. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. and then click Modify.30 Select Spot Elevation . double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. 33 Click to the left of the left break line.MECHANICAL LEGEND. enter E. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Creating a Legend | 335 .Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 34 Using the method learned previously. 35 Change the text on the right to N.

and select Title w Line .39 With the viewport still selected.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Press Esc.

A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser .rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files.Detailing 15 In this lesson. detail groups.113 East elevation view. 337 . A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. A drafting view using detail components. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. and text. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A detail callout that references another view.

and click to place it. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet.113 East on the sheet. 4 On the Options Bar. place Power Riser . double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . clear Leader. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. 5 In the drawing area. Next. 8 Using the same method. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing .113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. and then modify and align the views.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select each of the 2 panelboards.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. 7 Drag the Power Riser . Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser.

enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. and click Activate View. right-click. 13 Right-click. and click OK. for Title on Sheet. under Identity Data. giving the appearance of a single view. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 Select the Level 1 line. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click Deactivate View. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. select the 113 North view.9 Press Esc. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 .

19 Select the Level 1 line. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. you add wiring to the diagram. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. and click Activate View. 22 Press Esc.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. right-click. 21 Using the drag control. and select Title w Line . as shown. In the next exercise. right-click.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. select the 113 East elevation view.

4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. and click OK. In the Line Styles dialog. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 8 On the Options Bar. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. 9 Beginning at the transformer. verify that Chain is selected. for Line Weight.113 North view. 2 Close the Project Browser. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. enter Electrical Power. and then click OK. for Name. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). notice that there are no snaps active. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . indicating that it’s the active view. select 6. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. As you draw.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . click Training Files. expand Lines. Under Modify Subcategories. In the New Subcategory dialog. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. click New.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down.

as shown. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing .10 Press Esc. enter 3mm. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. for Offset. 11 Using the same method. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 13 On the Options Bar. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.

19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. so that the result is as shown.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 .

22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram.

31 While pressing Ctrl.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). select Multiple. 29 Click Modify. 33 On the Options Bar.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 28 Click above the cap. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. and select 1. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point.

346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 36 Press Esc.

enter 3. 39 Move the cursor to the right. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. enter 7. and then press Esc. enter 12.0. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. You enter exact values for each line length. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. Press Esc. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . Using the same method. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. click on the length dimension value. change the length of the bottom line to 3. 40 Press Esc. you can ensure that they stay together. and press Enter. for Offset. 42 On the Options Bar. and press Enter.

53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 51 Using the method learned previously. 54 Select the group.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 47 In the drawing area. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 50 With the group selected. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. 52 Select the detail group. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. TP-2B. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. expand Groups ➤ Detail. and click OK. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. while pressing Ctrl. 46 In the Project Browser. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. enter Ground. and then press Esc. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. for Name. select all 3 lines.

Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. In later exercises. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. and will place it on sheet E01. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport.

and click Rename. Back. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 8 On the ViewCube. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. and then click the corner where the Top.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section). 4 In the Project Browser. expand Documentation ➤ HVAC .rvt. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. 2 Zoom in to view the section. click Training Files. Walkthroughs. and click OK. and then press Esc. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and Left sides converge. click Home. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. for Name. 6 In the Rename View dialog. and click Apply View Template. and double click Typical Make Up Air. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. 5 Right-click the copy.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Select the section box. select 3D Views.

Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Click OK. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Move the cursor down and to the left. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.■ ■ Under Names. and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. and click to specify the second leader point. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. select 3D HVAC Iso. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). 15 Using the same method. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Typical.

select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. and under Extents.18 Press Esc. as shown. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 19 Complete the text labels. as shown. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 23 Click on the crop region. and then click OK. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. under Extents. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. To rotate and reposition a text label. select Crop Region Visible. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail.

and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. 33 Right-click the view. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. select Crop View and Section Box.25 Click OK. 30 On the View Control Bar. and under Extents. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . 29 Right click the view. scroll down. 32 In the Instance Properties.rvt. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. clear Crop Region Visible. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. click Training Files. and click Deactivate View. and click View Properties. Use detail lines to create a detail group. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. Place a detail component. and click Activate View. and click OK. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes.

select Documentation.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. select 1 : 5. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Plumbing. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. right-click the view name. and click Properties. for Sub-Discipline. 9 Zoom in to the component. as the rectangle start point. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. Click OK. 3 In the Project Browser. Click OK. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 13 In the drawing area. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. click the point at the top of the drain. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 12 On the Element panel. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. For View Classification. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. as shown. For Scale.

click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. for Type. select C.I. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. 21 In the drawing area. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140. 20 Select 1. 18 With the filled region still selected. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . and then press Esc. 22 Click Modify.P.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. Concrete.

click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. select Multiple. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select the filled region. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. (Line). 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 23 In the drawing area. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing .Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 34 Press Esc. 31 On the Options Bar. and then click to select them. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 28 Click Modify.

and then select the side of the slab above the line. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. and then press Esc. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 40 Click Finish Region. Drafting Detail Components | 357 .35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab.

52 In the Create Group dialog. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 49 Click Modify. select the Flashing Membrane group. enter Flashing Membrane_F. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. draw wide detail lines as shown. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. for Name. as shown. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down.. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 45 Using the method learned previously.D. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. and click OK.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and then click to select them. (Rectangle). Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. press Tab to highlight the chain. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. as shown.54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 55 Press Esc. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 61 Using the same method. press Spacebar twice. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.

65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 67 On the Options Bar.62 Press Esc twice. as shown. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 64 Press Esc twice. select Leader and Free End. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. and click to specify the text insertion point. Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 72 If necessary. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 81 Select the text note. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then click OK. 78 Move the cursor to the left. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 71 Click Modify. and click to specify the second leader point. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 76 To select the leader start point. 80 Press Esc twice.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. select 15000 (Division 15 .70 In the Keynotes dialog. Drafting Detail Components | 361 .Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150.

82 Continue annotating the detail. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. as shown. 84 Using the following image as a guide. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.

select the view title.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 88 In the drawing area. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 90 Press Esc. open P103 . Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. and then press Esc twice. and click to place it. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 91 Close the file with or without saving it.

364 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful